RMTL Series Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder (Precision Guide Type)

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL20X800SAT

  Specifications: RMTL20X800SAT is a 20 mm bore, 800 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 20 20 mm cylinder bore X800 800 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 220 N Air port NPT1/8 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1000 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 939 mm (139 + 800) AD 25.5 AE 25.5 AF 86 B 120 BC 117 C 46 CA 45 D 22.8 J 9.5 JA 5 JB + stroke 905 mm (105 + 800) JC 40 JD 8.5 JE 8.5 K M6×1 depth10 KB 50 KC 90 L M6×1 depth10 LD 5.5 P NPT1/8 R 16 RB 80 S 22.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 9.6 kg at strokes up to 500 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA1007-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 1.67 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 0.24 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 20 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 0.8 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V110M5 / 5V120M5 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A110M5 / 4A120M5 Flow control / silencer example PTLM5 / BSLM5 Tube outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 1/4 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 6 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC1/4-1/8: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL1/4-1/8A: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC6M5: M5×0.8 male × 6 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC601: PT1/8 male × 6 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A060040100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A060040100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 6 mm OD × 4 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V110M5A050, 5V110M5A200, 5V120M5A050, 5V120M5A200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V110M5B050, 5V110M5B200, 5V120M5B050, 5V120M5B200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V110M5C050, 5V110M5C200, 5V120M5C050, 5V120M5C200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V110M5E050, 5V110M5E200, 5V120M5E050, 5V120M5E200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V110M5F050, 5V110M5F200, 5V120M5F050, 5V120M5F200: M5×0.8 female main ports; M5×0.8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A110M5/4A120M5 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 6 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSLM5 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (M5×0.8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 15/12 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 5043 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $884.39

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X1000SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X1000SAT is a 40 mm bore, 1000 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X1000 1000 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 1209 mm (209 + 1000) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 1159 mm (159 + 1000) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 17600 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,211.97

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X900SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X900SAT is a 40 mm bore, 900 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X900 900 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 1109 mm (209 + 900) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 1059 mm (159 + 900) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 16800 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,138.30

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X800SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X800SAT is a 40 mm bore, 800 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X800 800 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 1009 mm (209 + 800) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 959 mm (159 + 800) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 16000 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,064.62

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X750SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X750SAT is a 40 mm bore, 750 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X750 750 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 959 mm (209 + 750) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 909 mm (159 + 750) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 15600 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,048.34

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X700SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X700SAT is a 40 mm bore, 700 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X700 700 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 909 mm (209 + 700) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 859 mm (159 + 700) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 15200 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,990.97

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X600SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X600SAT is a 40 mm bore, 600 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X600 600 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 809 mm (209 + 600) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 759 mm (159 + 600) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 14400 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,917.29

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X500SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X500SAT is a 40 mm bore, 500 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X500 500 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 709 mm (209 + 500) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 659 mm (159 + 500) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 13600 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,843.64

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X450SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X450SAT is a 40 mm bore, 450 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X450 450 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 659 mm (209 + 450) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 609 mm (159 + 450) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 13200 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,806.78

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X400SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X400SAT is a 40 mm bore, 400 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X400 400 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 609 mm (209 + 400) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 559 mm (159 + 400) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 12800 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,769.96

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X350SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X350SAT is a 40 mm bore, 350 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X350 350 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 559 mm (209 + 350) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 509 mm (159 + 350) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 12400 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,733.13

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X300SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X300SAT is a 40 mm bore, 300 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X300 300 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 509 mm (209 + 300) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 459 mm (159 + 300) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 12000 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,696.31

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X250SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X250SAT is a 40 mm bore, 250 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X250 250 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 459 mm (209 + 250) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 409 mm (159 + 250) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 11600 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,659.45

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X200SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X200SAT is a 40 mm bore, 200 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X200 200 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 409 mm (209 + 200) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 359 mm (159 + 200) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 11200 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,622.63

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X150SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X150SAT is a 40 mm bore, 150 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X150 150 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 359 mm (209 + 150) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 309 mm (159 + 150) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 10800 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,585.80

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X100SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X100SAT is a 40 mm bore, 100 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X100 100 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 309 mm (209 + 100) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 259 mm (159 + 100) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 10400 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,548.95

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X50SAT

  Specifications: RMTL40X50SAT is a 40 mm bore, 50 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X50 50 mm stroke S Position-sensing magnet included A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 259 mm (209 + 50) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 209 mm (159 + 50) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The RMTL cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. For this S configuration, install the selected G-profile sensor in the matching sensor mounting rail supplied with the magnetic configuration. Position detection uses the magnets at the four corners of the body; fit the rail at the matching mounting holes in the end plates. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide to the required switching position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder or rail mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 10000 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,512.12

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X1000AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X1000AT is a 40 mm bore, 1000 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X1000 1000 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 1209 mm (209 + 1000) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 1159 mm (159 + 1000) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 17420 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,204.63

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X900AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X900AT is a 40 mm bore, 900 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X900 900 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 1109 mm (209 + 900) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 1059 mm (159 + 900) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 16635 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,131.58

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X800AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X800AT is a 40 mm bore, 800 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X800 800 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 1009 mm (209 + 800) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 959 mm (159 + 800) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 15851 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,058.56

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X750AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X750AT is a 40 mm bore, 750 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X750 750 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 959 mm (209 + 750) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 909 mm (159 + 750) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 15459 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $2,042.62

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X700AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X700AT is a 40 mm bore, 700 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X700 700 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 909 mm (209 + 700) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 859 mm (159 + 700) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 15066 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,985.51

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X600AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X600AT is a 40 mm bore, 600 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X600 600 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 809 mm (209 + 600) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 759 mm (159 + 600) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 14282 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,912.49

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac RMTL series: linear-bearing guided rodless cylinder - RMTL40X500AT

  Specifications: RMTL40X500AT is a 40 mm bore, 500 mm stroke RMTL magnetically coupled rodless cylinder. Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning RMTL Magnetically coupled rodless cylinder with twin precision guide rods and linear bearings 40 40 mm cylinder bore X500 500 mm stroke (blank magnet) No position-sensing magnet A Two hydraulic shock absorbers; two adjustment screws also supplied T NPT port-thread option Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.2–0.7 MPa Proof pressure 1.2 MPa Operating temperature −20 to +70 °C Operating speed 50–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.5 mm Safe magnetic holding force 880 N Air port NPT1/4 Cushioning Fixed cushioning and two hydraulic shock absorbers Maximum catalog stroke for this bore 1500 mm Current configuration dimensions Dimensions are millimeters unless a thread is shown. Each letter follows the source drawing; the letters are not interchangeable with overall length or hole spacing. Values marked “+ stroke” below include this product’s stroke. Read the drawing for diameter symbols, depths and mounting orientation. Parameter Details A + stroke 709 mm (209 + 500) AD 35.5 AE 35.5 AF 136 B 190 BC 187 C 78 CA 74 D 43 J 14 JA 8 JB + stroke 659 mm (159 + 500) JC 84 JD 10.5 JE 10.5 K M8×1.25 depth12 KB 90 KC 140 L M10×1.5 depth15 LD 8.5 P NPT1/4 R 25 RB 130 S 50.5 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Guide loading and shock-absorber service Parameter Details Maximum centered load in the illustrated load / stroke arrangement 40 kg at strokes up to 600 mm Optional / replacement hydraulic absorber ACA2020-1N Absorber locknut tightening torque 10.8 N·m The centered-load figure requires the load center of gravity to coincide with the carriage in the illustrated arrangement. For longer strokes or offset loads, use the source curve. Use separate horizontal and vertical load / speed curves. The permissible load reduces with speed and stroke; do not apply the maximum static figure throughout the operating envelope. Replace a shock absorber when energy absorption deteriorates. Loosen the retaining nut, remove the old absorber, install the specified replacement, adjust its working position and retighten to the listed torque. The rear screw of the absorber is not an adjustment control. Turning it can release hydraulic oil. Magnetic coupling and intermediate stopping The piston and external carriage are coupled magnetically, with no mechanical link through the cylinder wall. Keep the working load and impact energy within the catalog limits; excessive pressure or stopping energy can separate the coupling. Parameter Details Maximum pressure with an external intermediate stop 0.55 MPa Maximum permitted kinetic energy for an intermediate stop made by the pneumatic circuit 1.53 J These are two separate stopping methods in the RMS installation instructions. Use a shock absorber at an external limit stop, adjust it for smooth deceleration and provide cushioning at both ends. For a pneumatic intermediate stop, check the energy limit. The guided series refers back to these RMS precautions; none of these figures permits pressure above the operating specification. Internal structure and materials 1. Left fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 2. End stop: Aluminum alloy. 3. O-ring: NBR. 4. O-ring: NBR. 5. Hex nut: Carbon steel. 6. Connecting rod: Stainless steel. 7. O-ring: NBR. 8. Bumper: NBR. 9. Piston seal: TPU. 10. O-ring: NBR. 11. Dust scraper: Plastic. 12. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 13. Piston: Aluminum alloy. 14. O-ring: NBR. 15. Piston spacer: Aluminum alloy. 16. Outer magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 17. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 18. Inner magnet spacer: Cold-rolled steel. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 20. Body cover: Aluminum alloy. 21. Wear ring: Wear-resistant material. 22. Moving block: Aluminum alloy. 23. Retaining ring: Aluminum alloy. 24. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 25. Stainless tube: Stainless steel. 26. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 27. Guide rod I: Medium-carbon steel. 28. Bumper: TPU. 29. Adjustment screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 30. Hex nut: SS41. 31. Right fixing plate: Aluminum alloy. 32. Hydraulic shock absorber: Assembly; material not stated. 33. Spring washer: Spring steel. 34. Hex-socket pan-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 35. Sensor retaining bar: Aluminum alloy. 36. Anti-collision block: Stainless steel. 37. Body: Aluminum alloy. 38. Linear bearing: Assembly; material not stated. 39. Bore retaining ring: Spring steel. 40. Guide rod II: Medium-carbon steel. 41. Hex-socket button-head screw: Medium-carbon/alloy steel. 42. O-ring: NBR. 43. Magnet: Rare-earth material. 44. Locating pad: NBR. 45. Steel ball: Stainless steel. Position sensing This configuration is supplied without a magnet. Do not assume a magnetic sensor can detect the piston without the corresponding magnetic conversion parts. The source thrust-versus-pressure graphs extend to 1.0 MPa for illustration. This does not increase the 0.7 MPa maximum operating pressure. Use the appropriate load / speed graph and the safe magnetic holding-force limit when sizing. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for carriage travel in either direction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. The listed complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. With these selected valves, the RMTL control branch is limited to 0.2–0.7 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and any lower component limit. Size flow for the cylinder's 50–500 mm/s operating range and the actual load; the theoretical 500 mm/s reference does not guarantee installed speed. Apply the stricter pressure and energy limits for the stopping method used. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 13497 g estimated reference. This is a configuration reference, not an independently measured net weight of the complete mounting package. The catalog states that actual product weight governs. Packaging and shipping weight are not included.

  Read more less

  $1,839.44

  View options

Show more products